Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. Finally.Introduction In this tutorial. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. 1 .

2 .

including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. 3 . Add more detailed modelling elements. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. and plumbing engineering workflows. such as duct. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. electrical panels. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. and piping. Germany. such as mechanical equipment. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. Add basic MEP elements. and plumbing fixtures. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. electrical. fixtures.

Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. Create schedules. however. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. When you install the training files as instructed. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. Create detail views. Metric file names have an _m suffix. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. After completing each exercise. NOTE Depending on your installation.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. annotations. You do not design entire systems. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. For example. In this exercise. However. For example. Contact your CAD manager for more information. such as templates and families. you learn where the training files are located. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. On the Contents tab. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. views. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. is located and accessed in the training files location. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. Metric: files for users working with metric units. and tags. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. templates. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. and sheets to document the project. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. your Training folder may be in a different location. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. when you add ductwork. as well as how to open and save them. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. to provide a richer and more finished design. you can choose to save your work. So. When you open a training file. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise.

3 In the right pane.rvt and make changes. a list of file types displays. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For Files of type. verify that Project Files (*. double-click Imperial or Metric. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. if you open settings. and click the Training Files icon. You may close the file with or without saving changes. and you can open any supported file type. and click Save.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Accessing Training Files | 5 . 8 If you have made changes. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. For example. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. and click Open.rvt) is selected. click ➤ Save As. 4 Click the training file name. scroll down. you are prompted to save the changes. select the folder in which to save the new file. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. enter the new file name. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option.rvt. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. For File name. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. the Open dialog displays.

6 .

schedules. In this case. You learn the terminology. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. If you move the partition. the hierarchy of elements. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. sections. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. quantities. drawing sheets. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. and schedules required for a building project. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. the parameter is one of association or connection. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. the door retains this relationship to the partition. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. In the Revit MEP model. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. and phases when you need it. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. the floor or roof remains connected. As you work in drawing and schedule views.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. and plans. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. In this case. ■ ■ 7 . In mathematics and mechanical CAD. drawings. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. scope. 2D and 3D view. If the length of the elevation is changed. the operation of the software is parametric. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. every drawing sheet. hence. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained.

grids. They display in relevant views of the design. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. levels. dimensions. For example. For example. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. Datum elements help to define project context. and electrical panels. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . For example. For example. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. and keynotes are annotation elements. tags. filled regions. For example.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. tags. When you change something. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. boilers. ducts. For example. They help to describe or document the design. and reference planes are datum elements. sinks. sinks. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. sprinklers. Examples include detail lines. and electrical panels. dimensions. boilers. walls and ceilings are hosts. ducts. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. sprinklers. and 2D detail components.

programming is not required. In Revit MEP. To place levels. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. and so forth). Project: In Revit MEP. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. In other cases. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. you must be in a section or elevation view. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. Often. top of wall. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. and types. This information includes components used to design the model. schedules. If you can draw. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. section views. such as roofs. The project file contains all information for the building design. families. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. you can explicitly control them. By using a single project file. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. from geometry to construction data. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. for example. and drawings of the design.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. floors.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. views of the project. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. North . first floor. or bottom of foundation. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Most often. you do nothing to establish these relationships. However. and ceilings. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. elevation views. For example.

■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Unlike system and standard component families. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. A type can be a specific size of a family. However. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. each in-place family contains only a single type. A type can also be a style. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. For example. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. or layer the views to see only the one on top. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. hiding. System families include ducts. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. System families can be transferred between projects. pipes. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. and similar graphical representation. and wires. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). showing. Then experiment with them. Type: Each family can have several types. For example. You can also display several project views at one time. For example.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. identical use. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. With a few clicks. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. such as a 30” X 42” title block. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow.

Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. To return the panel to the ribbon. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file.

. and for switching views. and CAD files. When working on the Modify tab. then select what you want to modify. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. architect-specific tools. project and system parameters. tools used for editing existing elements. data and systems. and settings. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements.. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. tools used for running analysis on the current design. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. select the tool first. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for.

To keep a panel expanded. closes the application menu (double-click). For example. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. displays frequently used tools. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. provides access to common tools. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. By default. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. provides requested information. when adding duct.

.. (Open) save the current drawing. click. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. select a template and create a new drawing.. such as Export and Publish.. select a file to open. (Export) On the application menu. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. (Save As) export the current drawing. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu.

provides views including Default 3D. click. family. annotation. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. or template file. publish the current project. and Walkthrough. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. family. Camera. saves a current project.. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. or template file. (Publish) print the current drawing. (Print) access product and license information. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. to. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. (Licensing) close the file. annotation. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . To enable or disable a tool item. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down.On the application menu. but is not enabled by default.... reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session.

repeat the command. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. workshared components. When you are using a command. When you are highlighting an element or component.To undo or redo a series of operations. or the Family Editor. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. when you switch to another editing mode. To show the Status Bar again. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. This displays the command history in a list. However. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. check the Status Bar. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. Clipboard. Modify. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. Clear the Status Bar check mark. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . displaying the same information. Starting with the most recent command. Group. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). In addition. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. To hide the Status Bar. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option.

Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. Place a Wall. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . click (Modify). Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. On the Quick Access toolbar.To cancel or exit the current command. select one or more elements of the same category. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. To change existing elements to a different type. When you place an element in a drawing. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. for example. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice.

you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project.rvt. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. In the following steps. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. After you are familiar with these tasks. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. Zoom the view In the tutorials. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. There are several ways to access zoom options. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. click Training Files. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. 1 Click ➤ Open. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. For example. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view.

click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. In the drawing area. NOTE As you zoom in and out. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. To modify or add snap increments. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. If you do not have a wheel mouse. this is referred to as a crossing selection. 6 Click in the drawing area. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. When you release the mouse button. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. click . the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. 9 To display SteeringWheels. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). on the Navigation bar. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. the view zooms in on the selected area. Modifying the View | 19 . Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels.

click the SteeringWheels tab. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . As you move the mouse. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. To define settings for SteeringWheels. and then using the Zoom tool again. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. Click and drag to orbit the design. moving the wheel to the desired location. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. and click tin the Options dialog. press ESC. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. ➤ Options. 14 To exit the wheel. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. For more information about SteeringWheels. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design.

it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. called drag controls. referred to as shape handles. display along the ends. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views.HVAC Plan .17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . Small blue dots. and open Level 2 . After you are familiar with these tasks.Design. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. Similar controls. 2 Enter ZR. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . bottoms. These are the drag controls. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. as shown. and select the duct. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct.Design ➤ Floor Plans. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view.

All changes you make to a project are tracked. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. 6 On the Undo menu. or press CTRL+Z. Move. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. select the first item in the list. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . click the drop-down menu next to (Undo).3 Click and drag the bottom control. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. In this example. click the Undo command. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. on the Standard toolbar. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct.

Some commands. such as Move and Copy. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . In this case. 11 With the duct already selected. 10 Move the cursor to the right. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. you want to move the duct. for example. and click again to specify the ending position. After selecting the element to move. as shown. require 2 clicks to complete the command. click to specify the starting position. and drag it to the left as shown.8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. The duct is moved to the new position.

click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. 13 To end a command. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct.Return. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. 14 Enter VG. such as the Modify Ducts command.Supply. For example. Press ESC twice. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical .End a command Some commands. Click OK. Select Mechanical .

17 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks | 25 .

26 .

The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. you learn how to start a project from a template. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. click Browse. and modify system settings. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. system families.rte template. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. and click Open. 27 . New projects inherit all the families. select Project. such as coordination review and interference checking. such as ducts and pipes. use copy/monitor. You can choose from several templates. link files. under Create new. In that case. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click Training files. 2 In the New Project dialog. and geometry from the starting template. the default building levels and standard views. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. under Template file. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. 5 In the New Project dialog. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. such as the default project units and settings. You can either select a template from the template library. and loadable families. Finally. create and manage views. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. settings. 6 Click OK. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions.

you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . select School or University.rte template and click Open. 8 In the drawing area. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. ■ ■ Under Create new. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). review the construction materials listed. NH. For example. under Energy Analysis. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. For Location. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. select Manchester. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. click Edit. you can select it now. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. navigate to Imperial Templates. create another new project using the Construction template. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. If you want to use a template other than the default. for Energy Data. (Browse). In the Choose Template dialog. When you select the material. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. and open North. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. select Level 1. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. for City. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. click (Browse). Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. click Browse. Click Cancel. Click OK. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. 10 Using the same method. select Project template.7 In the Project Browser. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. ■ For Building Construction. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. Click OK twice. 11 Close the file with or without saving it.

For Ground Wire Tick Mark. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 33 Click OK.rfa and click Open. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. plumbing. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . and fire protection systems. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 10 1/2". for 3 1/2". For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. for 3 1/2". 23 In the left pane. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. and 5 1/2". Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. 22 In the right pane. click Wiring. piping. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. for 3/4". For Categories. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. click Round. 26 In the right pane. under Duct Settings. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. select Identity Data. under Duct Settings. 4 1/2". click Rectangular. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 11 1/2". and 12 1/2". 5 1/2". under Pipe Settings. select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. 24 In the right pane. ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. 4 1/2". click Sizes. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder.rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. After standard settings have been established for an organization. power distribution systems. wiring. 27 Click OK. Holding CTRL. Click OK twice. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. and demand factors for electrical systems. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. select Views. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 25 In the left pane.

you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. sheets. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. To enable this coordination. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. select Sub-Discipline. under Template file. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit.rvt. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. families. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. In addition.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. From the Positioning list. select Associated Level. 38 Close the file. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. Click Open. Notice that the file is saved as a template. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. select Family and Type. 2 In the New Project dialog. For Then by. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects.Origin to Origin. 4 In the New Project dialog. Select Ascending Click OK twice. select Auto . under Create new. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. select Project. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. 5 Click OK. click Browse. You need to create the MEP model for the project. For Sort by. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. and groups that are contained in a project. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. For Then by. select View Name. click Training. Linking Projects In this exercise. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects .

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

and click (Browse). click (Add Value). 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . templates. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. and change the name to My Library. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. and click Open. 15 Under Library Name. and click OK twice. click the My Library icon. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Load. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. ➤ Open.11 In the Places dialog. and Import dialogs. or families. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. Save. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. and select it as the library path. click My Library.

6 Click File menu ➤ Save. If you want to relocate this path. click Edit. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. 2 In the Options dialog. 21 On the File Locations tab. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. (Remove Value) to delete the library. click Places. 20 Click ➤ Options. select Ignore words in uppercase. specify the new location here. click Edit. 23 Click 24 Click OK. 27 Click OK. custom color files. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. If you work in a large office. 14 Click in the drawing area. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. click the Spelling tab. and decal image files. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 22 Select My Library. 5 In the text editor. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 19 Click Cancel. view the current path. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. This path is determined during installation. 11 In the Options dialog. 12 Create a new project using the default template. enter sheetmtl-Cu. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. such as bump maps. 3 Under Settings. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 9 In the text editor. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. click OK.

6 In the Snaps dialog. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project.. 22 In the text editor. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. under Template file. delete sheetmtl-CU. click the Spelling tab. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . 4 In the New Project dialog. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. click Close. click OK. click Restore Defaults. you modify snap settings. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. under Dimension Snaps. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. 24 In the Options dialog. click Edit. click Training Files. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. You can turn snap settings on and off. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 21 Under Personal dictionary. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. 20 Under Settings. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. and enter 1 . click Browse. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration.17 In the Spelling dialog. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. As you zoom in and out within a view. you modify snap increments. click File menu ➤ Save. 2 In the New Project dialog. 23 In the text editor. In this exercise. work with snapping turned off.rte. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 18 Click ➤ Options. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. click OK. 19 In the Options dialog. 25 Close the file without saving it.

This is the increment that you added previously. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. If it does not. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option.7 Under Object Snaps. If you do not have a wheel button. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. enter SM. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. TIP To zoom while sketching. such as ZO to zoom out. deselect Chain. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. For example. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. and move the cursor to the right. use the wheel button on your mouse. snapping reverts to the system default settings. 10 On the Options Bar. zoom out until it does so. 8 In the Snaps dialog. click OK. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. While sketching. After you click to place the object at the midpoint.

with or without saving it. 22 Move the cursor downward. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. the midpoint. Notice that snapping is once again active. and specify the wall endpoint. 25 Click OK. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. it will snap to the endpoints. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints.. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. and the wall edges. 26 Close the file. If you move the cursor along the wall. Do not set the wall end point. 19 Enter SM.14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. and move the cursor to the right. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . and delete the value 1’ . Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 24 Under Dimension Snaps.

You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system. 43 .Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.

44 .

After finishing each exercise. you first plan the system. However. you design a mechanical system for an office building. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. water source heat pump (WSHP). you can choose to save your work. In this exercise. After applying a color scheme to the zones. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. 45 . The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. If the tutorial training files are not present. In this lesson. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. duct system and a hydronic piping system.autodesk. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. This system consists of a cooling tower. you first configure the linked architectural model. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. As you create the mechanical system. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. methodology. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. go to http://www. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. and then you create a plenum level. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. At the end of the tutorial. you will understand the process. By following the recommended workflow.

These components are defined in the architectural training file. click to select it. 1 In the Project Browser. and after the linked model highlights. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. click Training Files.rvt. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. NOTE When working with a linked file.Space Plan is highlighted. select Room Bounding. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. roof. In this section. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . under Constraints. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Next. not in the MEP training file. indicating that it’s the active view. and click OK. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. you add a level for plenums. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. ceilings.

offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and enter Level 2 Plenum. enter 8'. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level.MEP. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. and click OK. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans.6 In the Project Browser. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. Click Plan View Types. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. 9 On the Draw panel. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. and in the Plan View Types dialog. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. Preparing Spaces | 47 . Verify that Make Plan View is selected. 16 Press Esc. The new level is placed. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). verify that only Floor Plan is selected. Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties. and double-click West . 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). For Offset.

This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. click Edit. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. enter 0. Under Extents. for View Range. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. For Cut plane. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. enter an Offset of 1' 0". and for Offset.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. In this exercise. and click Apply Default View Template. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. In this exercise. you place spaces in areas of the building model. right-click Level 2 Plenum. 20 In the Project Browser. Under Identity Data. for Top. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. and then place spaces in various types of areas. Under View Depth. For Sub-Discipline. for View Scale. For View Classification. In the next exercise. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. select Design. right-click Level 2 Plenum. select Plenum Plan. ■ Click OK twice.Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. However. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. and click Properties. you can choose to save your work. for Default View Template. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. for Level. select MEP . The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP .Plenum. select Level Above (Level 3). 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. NOTE After finishing each exercise.

For Upper Limit. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. Placing Spaces | 49 . and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. select New. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i. For Space. walls.rvt. and ceilings). Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. For Offset. For (Tag Location). verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . indicating that it’s the active view. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor.Space Plan is highlighted.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. select Horizontal. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. select Level 2 Plenum. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. enter 0.

14 In the drawing area. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Click OK. For Name. 9 Select the space. for Number. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. enter 219. ensuring coordination between the files.7 Click to place the space. enter Library. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

and then click Modify. For Upper Limit. 21 Using the method learned previously. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. enter 0. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Placing Spaces | 51 . Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. For Offset. 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. select Level 3.

23 Click OK. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. and then split the space using a space separation line. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. you place a space in a large corridor area. under Energy Analysis. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. 25 Close the file with or without saving it.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes.

click Training Files. for Upper Limit.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. indicating that it’s the active view. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. and then press Esc. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i. 5 On the Options Bar.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Level 3. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . enter 0.Space Plan is highlighted. and for Offset.

click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. 11 Close the schedule view. which was numbered 219Q. and press Enter. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . as shown. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line.7 In the Project Browser. In the schedule. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. 10 Using the same method. the plan view would have updated with the changes. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. double-click the space name. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. 9 In the floor plan. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. enter Corridor. change the space number to 216A. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. and scroll to the newly placed space.

17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. 16 Using the method learned previously. place a space in the lower area of the split space. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. 18 Close the file with or without saving it.15 Press Esc twice.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . indicating that it’s the active view. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). If necessary. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section.rvt. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. you place a space in a chase. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase.Space Plan is highlighted.Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.

select Level 3. for Name. enter 225PC. click in the chase area to place the space. for Upper Limit. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. In the plan view. 10 In the plan view. select the space. For Limit Offset. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. enter 0. select Roof Level. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. For Number. for Upper Limit. enter Chase. Under Identity Data. For Offset. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. and then click OK. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. enter 4'. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. right-click. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. 12 Click in the section view. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. expand Spaces.4 Press Esc. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. and click Element Properties. select Interior and Reference. On the Options Bar. 6 Enter VG.

18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations.Space Plan. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. All spaces in the view are tagged. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and you placed spaces for various types of areas. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. In the next exercises. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area.Bounding elements (such as walls. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. ceilings. floors. and click OK. under Loaded Tags. select Space Tag With Volume. 17 Type ZF. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. and maximize the view. 15 Press Esc.

1 In the Project Browser. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. After a space is placed in an area. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. it is automatically added to the Default zone. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. In the left pane of the Open dialog. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . click Reference. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area.Zoning is highlighted. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone.rvt. In this exercise. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. under Spaces. Notice that Default is currently the only zone.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. which removes the space from the Default zone. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. To display space reference lines. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. click View ➤ Zones. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. and click Finish Editing Zone. and a new zone is created. under Energy Analysis. indicating that the space is occupiable. double-click 121 Cafeteria. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser.5 In the System Browser. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. Using the Edit Zone tab. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. The Zone tool is active. and verify the zones in the System Browser. click Training Files. you assign spaces to a zone. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Next. As you do this. click Reference. Instruction 221. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. select Occupiable. the Edit Zone tab displays. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. under Spaces. and modify the zone properties. indicating that it’s the active view. The graphic in the System Browser updates. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Zoning is highlighted. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog.rvt. you assign spaces to zones in the building. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. and Electrical 220 spaces. you can add or remove a space from the zone. select Computer Lab 222. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. 4 In the drawing area. To display space reference lines.

type VG. select HVAC Zones. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. you need to activate the zone visibility. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. To view the zone in the drawing area.In the System Browser. 5 With the drawing area active. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). Instruction. Expand HVAC Zones. Click OK.

In this exercise. and verify the zone in the System Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.West . The new zone name displays in the System Browser. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 12 Close the file with or without saving it.Zoning. 9 In the System Browser. To display space reference lines.Area B. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. 11 Close the System Browser. click Training Files. and click OK. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone.TIP After you finish editing the zone. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). under Identity Data.West . Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. expand 2 . click Finish Editing Zone. click Reference. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. You activated zone visibility in the views. indicating that it’s the active view.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. enter 2 . Rename the zone 7 Select the zone.Zoning is highlighted. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. for Name.rvt. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Spaces.

10 Click Finish Editing Zone. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected.Zoning floor plan. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . Select Attached End. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone.Zoning view. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 9 With the Add Space tool active. 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.5 Click in the Level 1 . 15 Press Esc. zoom out.Zoning view. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . click in the Level 2 . Verify that the distance is 1/2". 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone.Zoning view to activate it. 8 In the Level 1 . and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone.

space. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. double-click Level 1 . on the ViewCube. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. In this exercise.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser.Zoning view. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. for Name Value. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 .rvt. 19 Close the file with or without saving it.Zoning to make it the active view. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise.East. and zone information. Front. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. enter Lounge . the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. and click OK. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. double-click the zone tag. click Training Files. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. you verify the building. click the corner where the Top. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i.

The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. Click (Highlight). and select 109 Lounge. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries.4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. click (Isolate). 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. With 109 Lounge selected. Next. verify that Wireframe is selected. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. you isolate the space. Using the Highlight tool.

you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. select Lounge/Recreation. click .■ On the Details tab. 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. For Construction Type. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. ■ ■ ■ Next. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and in the People dialog. and click OK. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. For People. verify that <Building> is selected. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. scroll down in the left pane. select 109 Lounge. Next. the space information displays for the selected space. Below the list of spaces and zones. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. click . and then click OK. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. and then click OK. click . For Electrical Loads. select 1_South_Lounge.

roofs. This indicates the outdoor air per person. verify that 70. click (Shading). NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. and humidification set point. and other room-bounding components. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. outdoor air per area. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters.00 °F : N/A is specified. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. For Cooling Information. verify that 74. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. floors. verify that <Building> is selected. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. This indicates the cooling set point.00 °F : N/A is specified. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . Below the list of spaces and zones. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. Next. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. and dehumidification set point. 12 Using the methods learned previously.00 °F : 90. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. heating air temperature. For Heating Information. the zone information displays for the selected zone. cooling air temperature.00 °F : 54.Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge. This indicates the heating set point. and air changes per hour. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown.

it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. for Number. 15 In the Project Browser. For Offset. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). Under Energy Analysis. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Because this is an unoccupied space. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Level 3. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Modify space properties 19 Select the space. Under Energy Analysis. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. enter 212P. For Name. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. open MEP . select Plenum. click Cancel. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. select Plenum. enter 0.Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. Click OK. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned.

is selected. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. click Training Files. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. click Edit. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes.Space Plan. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i. click in the Value field. In this exercise. for City. you verified building. and verify that the space has replaced the void. space. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2 . and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. For Location. NH. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. select School or University.rvt. under Energy Analysis.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . and select space Plenum 212P. verify that Manchester. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. enter 03101. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. For Postal Code. for Energy Data. On the Place tab. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and zone information. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling.

verify that New Construction is selected. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. For Sliver Space Tolerance. Select Area per person. verify that <Building> is specified. For Export Complexity.Audio Visual. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. verify that 1' 0" is specified. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. for Building Service. for Values. verify that Occupiable is selected. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . ft. ■ On the Weather tab. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. For Project Phase. and click OK. select Specified. select Specified. and enter 50 sq. ■ In the Type Properties dialog. enter 150 Btu/h. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. and click Element Properties. For Building Construction. Click OK twice. and then click .When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. For Sensible. right-click. this option adjusts the times automatically. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. For Latent. both. If. click Edit. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. select space Library 219. For Space Type. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 8 In the drawing area. a cooling load. verify that Level 1 is selected. For Condition Type. select Library . verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. and click OK. Under Heat Gain (per Person). In order to select a space. For People. you need to select this option. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. select Heated and cooled. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). under Volume Computations. for Values. or neither. For Ground Plane. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. enter 200 Btu/h. and click OK. click in the Value column.

For Building Service. NH. select 219 Library. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. for Values. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. For Building Construction. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. Next. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Under Power. You should correct the space error in the building model. select Actual. verify that School or University is selected. select Actual. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . is specified. click Calculate. 12 Click the Details tab. There should be no warnings displayed. For Electrical Loads. and click to learn the cause for the warning. and click OK. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. For Location. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays.■ ■ ■ Click OK. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. and under Heating Information. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. verify that Manchester. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). click Edit. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Select the space associated with the warning. verify that <Building> is specified. and can be modified here. You have verified the building information. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. for Values. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. Click OK twice. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. click Information).

22 Close the file with or without saving it. space. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. select HVAC Zones. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. 3 In the drawing area. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. 19 In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i. 15 Review the loads report for project. under Energy Analysis. 21 Click OK. 16 After you review the loads report. indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select 219 Library. Click OK. click Training Files. or zone information. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. In this exercise. 17 In the loads report. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . weather.Space Plan. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. For Color Scheme. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. click to the right of the building to place the legend. space. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . or make any changes to the model. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. and zone information for the building model. and a loads report displays. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. in 1-ton increments. and click OK. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. select Tonnage Range. under Schemes. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value.5 Zoom in to the legend. select the color scheme legend. The new scheme displays in the view.

open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. 11 Using the method learned previously. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser.

■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. Select Schedule building components. Click OK. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . for Select available fields from. enter Space Airflow Schedule.12 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. For Phase. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i. select Spaces. In this exercise. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. select New Construction. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. more category options are available. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . In the next exercise.Space Fill is the active view. click Training Files. For Name. select Spaces. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities.

Select Formula. and Blank line. In the Calculated Value dialog. select Level. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. select Air Flow. select Calculated Supply Airflow.■ Under Available fields.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. Header. For Formula. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. select Number. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. select Airflow Delta. enter . For Discipline. select HVAC. and then select Hidden field. Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. select Level. click (Browse). double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. and then click Conditional Format. For Then by. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. In the Schedule Properties dialog. Click OK. and click OK. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and then click . ■ Click Calculated Value. select Not Between. enter Airflow Delta. In the Fields dialog. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. Select Ascending. For Type. for Formula. For Fields.

a view opens that contains the selected space. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. verify that Show is highlighted. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. Under Conditions to Use. right-click to access schedule properties. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. click the color swatch. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. In this exercise. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. In later exercises. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM.■ ■ ■ For Value. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. select red. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. Click OK twice. and click OK. In the Color dialog. ■ The schedule displays. In the next lesson. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . For Background Color.

78 .

you modify air terminal parameters. After system creation. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. and work with the airflow schedule. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. After completing the air systems lesson. Then. you will create supply air systems. In this lesson. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). 79 .Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. As you place the air terminals. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. you size ductwork and validate your air system design.

and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. click Training Files. the space crossing lines display. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . When you highlight a space using the cursor. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and scroll to space 223. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active.rvt.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. 3 In the ceiling view.

Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. and press Enter. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. type 12.Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . enter 425 CFM. 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. Also. If the host element is modified or moved. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. and select Supply Diffuser . and press Enter. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected.Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. which in this case is the ceiling grid. the hosted elements are updated as well. for Flow. 9 On the Placement panel. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and then select both Copy and Multiple. click Place on Face. 13 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Options Bar.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . 17 Move the cursor down. select the diffuser. The schedule updates with the new flow data. and then press Esc to end the command. verify that Constrain is cleared. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. as shown. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement.Rectangular Face Round Neck .HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view.

select each of the 5 supply diffusers. 28 On the Placement tab. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. 24 In the Open dialog. as shown. and then press Esc. Next.rfa. As you place the return diffusers. 29 Place 2 diffusers. clear Leader. 21 On the Options Bar. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. 25 In the drawing area. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. click Yes. and click Open. 27 Select Return Diffuser . navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. 22 In the drawing area. select one of the diffusers. click Place on Face. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down.

open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. select one of the return diffusers. select Strong Reference. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. Level. 31 In the alert dialog. and click to select the lines. under Other. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. as shown. 32 In the Project Browser. for Reference. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. click Yes.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

44 Zoom in to space 115. Verify that the measured distance is 9'. and click OK. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. ■ ■ For the end point. enter 9' 0"2750. click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP. click the Level 1 line. for Constraints ➤ Offset. For the start point. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump.

Design is highlighted. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. In this exercise. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment.HVAC Plan . This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. When you highlight a space. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i.rvt. click Training Files. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. However. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. indicating that it’s the active view. including energy analysis. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click View ➤ Systems. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. right-click the title. the space crossing lines display. You then create the logical connection between the system components.Press Esc. After creating the logical connection. you also use the System Browser to validate systems.

and Flow value. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. 6 Keep the System Browser open. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. System Name. Connect Into. the number of elements is updated. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. review the Number of Elements. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. 12 In the System Browser. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. 15 Click Cancel. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. 11 In the drawing area. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. As you add diffusers to systems. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. On the Options Bar. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab.

you create ductwork to physically connect system components. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. 26 Click Finish Editing System. In this exercise. 22 Click OK. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). under Mechanical. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 18 Click OK. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. for Mark. 25 Click OK. and the system connects them. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. In this exercise. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. the air terminals are the children.17 Using the method learned previously. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. Rename the system Next. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. under Identity Data. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. for System Name. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. which updates the name in the System Browser.

and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. which provides various layout tools. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. When you highlight a space using the cursor. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. select Network.Design is highlighted. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. A Generate Layout tab displays. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed.rvt. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i.HVAC Plan. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select the upper left diffuser. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. the Network type provides several solutions. 4 In the drawing area. Also. for Solution Type. the space crossing lines display. and display solution 1. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. In this case. 5 On the Options Bar. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. click Training Files. Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

For Maximum Flex Duct Length. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . For Duct Type. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. enter 9' 10 1/2". you’ll get an error in a later step. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. as shown. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. enter 9' 10 1/2".7 On the Options Bar. click Settings. Click OK. For Offset. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. Select Branch. click Modify. For Flex Duct Type. For Offset.Round. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures. For Duct Type. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. enter 3'.

For example. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. select a different layout solution. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. or offset elevations are incorrect. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . as is the elbow itself. Either relocate the system components.11 Click Finish Layout. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. or manually modify the duct.

but not all values are used in this view. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. and equipment. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. Usually. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. If the entire network does not highlight. and then click OK. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. The first time you press Tab. and click OK. for Color Scheme. fittings. thus it is not part of the system. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and click to select it. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. under Graphics. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. Using a flow-based color scheme. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. a disconnection exists. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. for Values Displayed.Flow. select Duct Color Fill . 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. highlight a segment of the main duct. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. select By View. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts.

select the WSHP. and press Enter. for Schemes. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. 20 In the drawing area.Velocity. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and then press Esc to clear the selection. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. and click OK. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. and on the Options Bar. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . for Flow. under Mechanical . decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.Airflow. select one of the diffusers in the system. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. select the color scheme legend. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. 26 Click OK. select Duct Color Fill . 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP.

The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. Select the upper segment of main duct. Select Only. select Calculated Size Only. and drag it to the right. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. select Friction. The ductwork and fittings are updated. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. and enter . 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. highlight a segment of the duct. and select 16". 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Select Restrict Height.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. for Branch Sizing. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. Under Constraints.08 in-wg/100ft. and then click to select it. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. click Cancel. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). Click OK.

and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. Use the information that displays (flow. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. static pressure. and pressure loss. pressure. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. Using this tool.Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork.

remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. 35 Click Finish. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 36 Close the file with or without saving it. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. also known as the critical path. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct.NOTE As you inspect a system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files.

2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . and click Draw Duct. and click to specify the end of the main duct. and select the WSHP. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors).Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down.HVAC Plan . 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel.Design is highlighted. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

click the corner where the Top. and click Draw Duct. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. for Offset. 15 On the ViewCube. double-click MEP . select 9' 10 1/2". 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct.8 Press Esc twice to end the command.3D MEP. NOTE When drawing duct. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. right-click the connector grip. 11 On the Options Bar.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. 14 In the Project Browser. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. select the top right diffuser. Front.

connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . 18 Make the floor plan the active view. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct).16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. 19 In the drawing area. in space 115. it is considered a closed loop. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. the color fill indicates the flow value. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. The ductwork is automatically created. Also. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. 22 Using the same method.

zoom in to the open end of the main duct. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. 25 Press Esc.Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. and select the top left diffuser. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. You can ignore the warning.

press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split).To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. and then click Modify. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. and click to select it. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. 30 Press Esc twice. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop.

verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. such as a plenum. for Flow. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . under Constraints. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. clear Restrict Height. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. and then click OK. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. select a segment of the main duct.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. and click OK. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection.Airflow. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. 40 Using the same method. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. under Mechanical .

In this lesson. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. Then. and a cooling tower located on the roof. 109 . or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. including 2 base mounted pumps. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. Create return and supply piping systems. Automatically and manually lay out piping.

including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. on level 3 of the building model.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. you place mechanical equipment. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i.

and select WSHP .2-6 Tons . A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . verify that Wall faces is selected. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component.Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. in corridor 328.Design is highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Left Return . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. as shown. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing.Horizontal . you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component.Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down. indicating that it’s the active view. 7 On the Options Bar.HVAC Plan .High Efficiency . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.

10 Select the WSHP. click the dimension.8 Click the corridor wall face.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. verify that the WSHP is still selected. click the top edge of the WSHP. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. and in the Type Selector. as shown. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc. and click to place the dimension. and enter 2'. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. as shown.

20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. Click OK. select the 2 WSHPs. and click to place it in the mechanical room. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 9'. for Water Flow. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. enter 12 GPM. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . Under Mechanical. for Offset.14 Click Modify. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. as shown. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

Create pipes to physically connect the system components. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. including flow and pressure. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. Create the logical connection between the system components. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses.21 Click Modify. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you create the return and supply piping systems.

rvt. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. You can create pipes to connect system components.HVAC Plan . analyses cannot be performed. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. where it is easier to review the information. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . 5 In the System Browser. and click View ➤ Piping. Creating a Piping System | 115 . 6 Expand the Unassigned folder.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . click Training Files. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. but without a corresponding system. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. Unlike logical connections (systems).Design is highlighted. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser.Mech 330). In the left pane of the Open dialog. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. right-click the Systems column heading.

9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. while pressing Ctrl. As you assign equipment to systems. 12 In the drawing area. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. select the 2 WSHPs. This display indicates that the system is selected. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. Therefore. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. and the Edit System tool is not active. 10 On the Options Bar. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. Assigning a system component to an existing system. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. for System Name. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. Notice that on the Options Bar. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. select the boiler. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment.In the System Browser.

double-click Roof . for System Name. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply.HVAC Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply.Design. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. Creating a Piping System | 117 . and select the cooling tower. 19 In the Project Browser. under Design ➤ HVAC . You have created the hydronic return system. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 17 On the Options Bar. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it.13 Click Finish Editing System.

select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In.22 In the Select Connector dialog. and click Expand All. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. 29 Right-click CHWS. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. In heating mode. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. and bypasses the cooling tower. 23 Close the roof plan view. 25 Select the boiler. expand the Hydronic Return system category. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. 28 Using the same method. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. and click Select. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. 26 Click Finish Editing System. In cooling mode. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. indicating the logical connection. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click OK.

you can view several parameters. under Mechanical. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. and click Column Settings. enter 18 GPM. and click OK. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. 32 In the System Browser. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. including the flow rate and size of the component. expand Piping. and click Properties. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 .In the System Browser. for Water Flow. You also manually modify the layout path as required. and click OK. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature.

then the Select a System dialog displays. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. A system preview displays in red.Mech 330). press Tab to highlight the system. the boiler. select CHWR. click Check None. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . indicating that it’s the active view. 10 Click OK. 9 In the Select a System dialog. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). and click OK. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps.rvt. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. and click to select it. 5 In the Filter dialog. 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). When you draw a box to select components. you can place the cursor over a system component. select Mechanical Equipment.Design is highlighted. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP.HVAC Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

select Perimeter. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. For Inset. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. or architectural components. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. click Settings. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . It does not reference the architecture. enter 1' 6''. verify that Solutions is selected. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created.11 On the Options Bar. 13 Click Cancel. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. duct. structural beams. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog.

select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. to display the path with thinner lines. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. and press Tab 3 times. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. 19 In the drawing area. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. and the flow for the other is 12. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. With each Tab. the flow for one WSHP is 18. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. 17 Optionally.16 Click Finish Layout.

The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. and click OK. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . 23 Under Mechanical. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. 22 Select the boiler. and access its instance properties. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. 24 Press Esc. and click OK. under Mechanical.

30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. double-click Level 1 . under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. which propagates flow throughout the system. 32 Click Finish Editing System. 28 In the Project Browser. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. click Edit System.HVAC Plan . 27 On the System Tools panel. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. Next. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . On the Options Bar.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. you physically close the CHWR loop. the Number of Elements is now 8. Logically. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view.Design. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System.Design ➤ Floor Plans.

Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. select a WSHP. under Mechanical. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . as shown. 35 Using the drag control. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). and click Cancel. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. access its instance properties. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. 38 Using the same method.

126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and then click OK. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. enter 1' 6''. select Perimeter 1 of 5. For Slope. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset.40 In the Select a System dialog. For Inset. Click Settings. enter 0''/12''. 41 Click OK. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. select CHWS.

48 While pressing Ctrl.The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. In a later exercise. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. (Both sections are at the same elevation. 47 In the drawing area. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). 46 Click Modify. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 . as shown. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps.) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control. as shown.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. Add piping to close the supply loop. To create the piping system. select a different layout solution. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. or manually modify the pipe. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. 51 Click Finish Layout. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe.50 Using the same method. or offset elevations are incorrect. Either relocate the system components.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D.Design is highlighted. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ 3D Views. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and the return pipes are magenta. double-click 3D HVAC Building.rvt.HVAC Plan . As you work in the training file.NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i. as shown. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .

as shown. 7 In the plan view. 6 Press Delete. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the section of piping.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view.

8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. and press Esc to clear the selection. ■ Click to move the piping. Click to specify the reference point. select the boiler. 9 In the 3D view. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. ■ Move the cursor up 4''.

select the return pipe riser. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. and the lower one is secondary. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. select the boiler. The connections are automatically created. and click OK. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. 13 In the plan view.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. 11 In the Select Connector dialog. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. 12 In the 3D view. and click Draw Pipe.

■ Move the cursor down.7''. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. enter 2'. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. for Offset. and you select 1 connector.In a plan view. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. and press Enter. enter 1' . 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. Add another 2' section of pipe to the right. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector.

NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. and the appropriate fittings are created. as shown. and select it. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. 18 Press Esc twice. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. 19 In the plan view. select the primary base mounted pump. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click OK. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. As you place piping runs that are close together. select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''.

you select the tee fitting. and when the connector point displays. right-click the bottom connector.24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. and click to draw the pipe. and click the minus symbol. 29 If necessary. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. 27 Move the cursor to the right. 28 Press Esc. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. and click Draw Pipe. click to connect to the pump. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 .

enter 4'. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. select the primary base mounted pump. 33 Press Esc. 31 On the Options Bar. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. and click Draw Pipe. and click to create the pipe. right-click the discharge connector. for Offset.

3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. 35 Using the method learned previously.Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. as shown. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. these pipe connections were created automatically. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . upgrade the fitting to a tee connector.

enter 9' 6''.36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. type 1'. right-click the bottom control on the tee. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . for Offset. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. ■ Move the cursor down. and click Draw Pipe. and click to create the pipe. and press Enter.

select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. you validate the flow through the system. Next. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . You now have a closed loop system. Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view.37 Click Modify. and click Element Properties. right-click.

notice that Flow is 125 GPM. The flow is being propagated through the piping. When you create the pumps in parallel. view the properties for the secondary pump. 40 Click Cancel. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system.50 or 50% of the Flow. and click OK. 41 Using the same method. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 43 Press Esc. as shown. Connect the cooling tower Next. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. select the cooling tower. 46 Press Esc. notice that under Mechanical. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). and click Element Properties. under Mechanical. the value is 0 GPM. right-click. In the Instance Properties dialog. 44 In the 3D view. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. 48 In the plan view. under Mechanical. for Cooling Water Flow.39 In the Instance Properties dialog. 42 Click OK. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow.

■ Lower pipe (outlet). Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. 49 Press Esc. Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system.

Adding Valves In this exercise.rvt. select the cooling tower. click Training Files. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 52 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. and is heated by the boiler. When the valve is open.50 In the 3D View. and close the dialog. the water bypasses the cooling tower. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower.

verify that the Diameter value is 3''.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and select Ball Valve .Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step.HVAC Plan . as shown. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve.Design is highlighted. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 4 On the Options Bar. The bypass valve is closed by default. Adding Valves | 143 . 8 Press Esc twice.

place another Ball Valve . 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down. 12 Select Ball Valve .10 Press Esc.2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. 14 Using the same method. 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. parallel to the previously placed valve.

(This valve allows the water to flow through it. right-click.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position).Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. and select Ball Valve . validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. and click Element Properties. under Mechanical. For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). In heating mode.2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. verify that Flow is 0 GPM. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). 19 Using the same method. and click OK. 20 Select the bypass valve. and select Ball Valve .2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. Adding Valves | 145 . you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode.

Design is highlighted. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. click Training Files. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .HVAC Plan .22 Using the method you just learned. as shown. Initially. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 23 Close the file with or without saving it. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM.

and click OK. and click OK.Flow. Sizing Pipe | 147 . click Pipe Color Fill . and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend.4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. for Schemes.Size. select Pipe Color Fill . 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods.

enter 5 FPS.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. Click OK. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used.25 FT/100ft. Under Constraints. 13 Press Esc. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. Select And. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. and click to select the branch. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. select Friction. and enter 2. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and for Velocity. for Branch Sizing.

Inspecting the System In this exercise. select a different layout solution. Using the System Inspector. or manually modify the pipe. Inspecting the System | 149 . 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level.Design ➤ 3D Views. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Either relocate the system components. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. or offset elevations are incorrect. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. click Training Files. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. and double-click 3D HVAC Building. 14 Close the file with or without saving it. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. pressure.

as required.3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. This information helps you modify the system design. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . An inspection flag reports the section number. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. and pressure information including pressure loss. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. flow. NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly.

and to size pipe. you need to validate them. Checking Piping Systems | 151 . In this exercise. as shown. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design.89 psi.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1. for Fluid Temperature. targeting those systems that need attention. 10 Click Finish.67 psi. and the Pressure Loss is 1. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open. 9 Using the same method. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. inspect Section 6 again. the Static Pressure is 7. and click OK. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. select 90° F.88 psi. 11 Close the file with or without saving it.

IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. In the System Browser. After you assign components to a system. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them.Design. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked.Design ➤ Floor Plans. NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. As you learned when placing components. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. and double-click Level 3 . the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings.Design. After you have assigned all components to systems. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. and click View. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. 6 In the Project Browser.HVAC Plan . You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. For example. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. thus assigning the components to a system. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 4 In the System Browser. the pipe is associated with that system. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). If you place components without assigning them to a system. Warnings display. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed.rvt. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. click Training Files.HVAC Plan . and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. double-click Level 1 . right-click the Systems titlebar.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 Right-click CHWS. 7 In the System Browser. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and for pipe sizing. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click Show to view all of the system components. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked.

expand the Unassigned folder. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. right-click Hydronic Return.TIP If you have multiple views open. click Close. Checking Piping Systems | 153 .Design floor plan. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. 15 Close the file with or without saving it.HVAC Plan . you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. 10 Using the same methods. 12 In the System Browser. 13 Right-click CHWR. and confirm unassigned system components. and select Level 3 . 14 Using the methods that you learned. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. otherwise. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. and click Expand All.

154 .

155 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial.

156 .

You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Define required lighting. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 . you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson.

wiring.rvt. click (Open). Select Correction Factor. ■ ■ For Material. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i. expand Wiring . 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . select Copper. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. enter THHN. select 90. For Temperature. ■ ■ For Factor.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. distribution systems. For Temperature Rating. speeding up the design phase. Click OK. For Material. As you place components and create circuits. In this exercise you review electrical settings. click Training Files.04. select 75. enter 1. You also add a wiring type. select Copper. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. select Wiring Types. and demand factors that are applied in the design. ■ Click New Correction Factor.Wire Sizes. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

■ ■ In the Color dialog. Click Background Color. for Custom Colors.■ ■ For Value. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Click OK three times. select Red. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. enter -5 fc and 5 fc. The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red.

You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. as you place lighting fixtures. 167 . power circuits. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. First. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. Create power loads. Create a panel schedule. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. Use the System Browser to check your design.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. Then. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise.

00 fc. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20. select Orange. select the color legend. for Basic Colors. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. click (Open). then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. select the color for Less Than 20.Lighting Color Fill view is open. select Average Estimated Illumination.rvt. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. 2 In the drawing area. In the Color dialog. Click OK. for the Spaces Category. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i. Under Scheme Definition.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.00 fc. By using orange as the color for this range. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . You can create additional color schemes. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. click Training Files. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes.

17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. zoom to space Library 219. 8 In the Project Browser. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . The red field will clear once the +/. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active.5 fc range. 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/.7 In the Project Browser.5 fc range is satisfied. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc.277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 . The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .277. 13 Click the Level 2 . which is the lowest value in the specified range. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active.Lighting Ceiling plan. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 .

select Multiple. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 23 Click OK. In the Space Lighting Analysis view.The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 25 On the Options Bar. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 20 Select the lighting fixture. the fixtures will move accordingly. 18 Click to place the fixture. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated.

select the 3 fixtures. select Multiple. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area.NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 . 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 30 On the Options Bar.

172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note the value in red for the space Library 219. 33 Click to activate the Schedule window.32 Press ESC. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.

36 In the Filter dialog.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click Check None. 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) . and for Category. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . Click OK. select Lighting Fixtures.277V.

38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .The values in the schedule are updated automatically. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

click the ceiling grid line as shown. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 .277V. 41 On the Options Bar. select Multiple Alignment. 42 In the drawing area. Note the changes for the space Library 219. 40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. The lighting delta is satisfied.39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) .

43 Click the left edge of the first fixture. 176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures. The fixture aligns.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i. In the next exercise. 46 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures.45 Press ESC to end the command. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.rvt. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. click (Open). Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 . you modify the light fixture IES files.

5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Lighting Plan. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view.Lighting Color Fill plan. 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . scroll to view space space Library 219. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 .Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 . zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type. Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 2 Tile the views as shown.

■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. click the value for Light Loss Factor. enter 162. Under Electrical. select Xenon and click OK. for Color Preset. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. Under Photometrics.00 lm. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule.00 VA.277V and click OK. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown.■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. for Ballast Loss Factor. enter F15.85. Under Photometrics. select 463T5_S. for Apparent Load. for Lamp. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 . enter . click the value for Initial Intensity. click the value for Initial Color. for Type Mark. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. select T5 [HO]. enter . In the Select File dialog.93. ■ Click OK twice. Under Photometrics. Note the lighting type has changed to F14. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads. ■ Under Photometrics. Under Identity Data. ■ Click Apply. select Luminous Flux. specify 15000. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W .ies and click Open. In the Name dialog. and click OK. Click OK.

Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown. 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and for Category. and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 10 In the Filter dialog.277V. 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures. 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . select Lighting Fixtures. click Check None. Click OK. Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated.

Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 . 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type.Press Delete. select the top center fixture. Note the lighting delta updates again. 15 In space Library 219.

Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.

Press Delete. Placing Switches.rvt. Junction Boxes. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 2 In the drawing area. Placing Switches. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. click (Open). The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. and receptacles to your design. you add switches. In the next exercise. Junction Boxes. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. and Receptacles | 183 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. junction boxes. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. click Training Files. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project.

Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor . 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face.277V. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 7 Click to place the switch.

rfa and click Open. Select Junction Boxes . Junction Boxes.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. Placing Switches. The element type Junction Boxes .NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.NoLoad. 12 In the Load Family dialog. 9 Press ESC to end the command. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. and Receptacles | 185 .

note the Number of Poles is 1. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. enter JB-1NL. enter 9’0”. for Level 2 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . for Mark. 21 In the drawing area. Click Edit Type. NOTE When entering values.Offset. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. In the Type Properties dialog. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. 15 Select the junction box. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. zoom to space Library 219. Click OK twice. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Under Electrical.14 Press ESC to end the command.

right-click and click Column Settings. Placing Switches. and Receptacles | 187 . This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. 23 In the System Browser. Expand Electrical. Select Size. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. Select Load. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. and Voltage. Distribution System. Space Name. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. Space Number. Junction Boxes. NOTE If necessary. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. Click OK.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and Number of Elements. 24 For any column. 26 In the System Browser. Expand General. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank.

188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 31 Close the System Browser.

40 On the Options Bar. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. 38 Select the receptacle. Junction Boxes. select Copy and Multiple. Placing Switches.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. and Receptacles | 189 .

190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and enter 12’ and press ENTER.41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. 42 Move the cursor down. move the cursor along the wall. enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle.

43 Press ESC to end the command. Placing Switches. and Receptacles | 191 . Junction Boxes.

46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . you need to create logical connections to define the topology. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire.48 Close the file with or without saving it.

then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. Adding wiring to a project is optional. zoom to the space Electrical 220. click (Open). click Training Files. and work toward the higher voltage. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.equipment. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i. 2 In the drawing area. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment.

10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. select 480/277 Wye.Surface: 100A. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .Loads. 15 On the Options Bar. for Distribution System.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. 14 Select the panelboard. For Panel Name. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . Click OK. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. 8 Select the panelboard. #1 Pole Breakers. select 120/208 Wye. enter PP-2B. enter 20. 9 On the Options Bar. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Distribution System. for Max.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 7 Press ESC to end the command.

24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. enter 20. zoom to space Instruction 221. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click OK. enter LP-2B. which is the logical connection between the elements. and for Category. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. click Check None.Loads. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. For Panel Name. 23 In the Filter dialog. 20 In the drawing area. #1 Pole Breakers. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . Click OK. for Max.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.

Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 32 Press ESC. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .28 Press ESC to end the command. 31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 33 Select the switch on the right. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 .34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 35 Select the left three-way switch. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit.

Click OK. except without wire. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . Next you create circuits without showing wire. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221. click Check None.37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 41 In the Filter dialog. and for Category. for Hot Conductors. Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4. Click OK. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Loads. enter 2. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 38 Press ESC to end the command. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. select Wires. click (Open).

Click OK. Voltage. expand Power. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. right-click on the Systems heading. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. 13 In the System Browser. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. Expand Electrical. Distribution System. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. Rating. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. and verify that Load. click Training Files. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. and Voltage Drop are selected. and then expand circuit 1. 2 In the drawing area.rvt. ■ 16 In the System Browser. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i.

29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 30 Close the System Browser. 22 With the junction box still selected. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. Click OK. change the Voltage to 277V.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. under Electrical. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 21 In the Instance Properties dialog.

46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. click below the first one to place it. enter FR4. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. note the label parameters and click Cancel. click Edit Type. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. Click Tags. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. Click OK. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture.Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Click Yes. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. 35 Press ESC to end the command. for Type Mark. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. under Identity Data. 40 Click OK twice. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. 47 In the drawing area. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . For Circuit Number. 61 Close the file with or without saving it. Click Save. 56 In the Filter dialog. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. Next you create a switch system. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. select Lighting Fixture Tags. Click OK. select Break. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. enter a comma. Click OK. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. and click Apply. click Check None. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. and for Category. 52 In the Save As dialog. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label .rfa. Click OK. 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Deselect Break and for Suffix. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. for File Name. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply.

9 Select the occupancy sensor. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. Click OK. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. click Training Files.rvt. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. click (Open). 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. for Switch ID. under Electrical Lighting. 2 In the drawing area.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter a. Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Creating a Switch System | 205 . 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID.

under Electrical . 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. for switch ID.Lighting. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. enter b. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. Click OK.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID.

The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. lighting. click Check None. select the PP-2B panel. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.rvt. 2 In the drawing area. Next you create a circuit and size wire. 7 In space Electrical 220. Circuits are used for power. and for Category. and data systems.26 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. Creating Power Loads | 207 . 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Click OK. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). 4 In the Filter dialog. click (Open). Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. click Training Files. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. select Electrical Fixtures.

Loads. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. for Hot Conductors. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. Click OK. and click Open. and click Element Properties. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 19 Click OK. 13 Select the wire again. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. under Electrical . and in the right pane. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter 2. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog.rfa. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. select Long Wire Tick Mark. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. select Wiring. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 15 In the Load Family dialog. and in the drawing area.

The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. and click to select the circuit. Creating Power Loads | 209 . Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. as shown. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. select the PP-2B panel. 22 In space Electrical 220.

There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. in space Instruction 221. 29 In space Instruction 221. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns.26 Press Delete. click the connector of the first receptacle. 28 In the drawing area. as shown. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc.

31 Close the file with or without saving it. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. click Training Files. 2 In the drawing area. select panel LP-2B.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. Next you balance the loads for your design. zoom to space Electrical 220. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. click Open. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Finally. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the Electrical space. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits.rvt. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 .

B. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. click Rebalance Loads. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. Under Electrical-Loads. and Phase C provides 2028 VA. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. Phase B 3636 VA. 1-#12. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 1-#12. 14 Close the warning dialog. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. 1-#10. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. for Rating. 6 Click OK. Scroll down.3616 VA). click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. enter 30A. 1-#10. 12 Select panel PP-2B. Click OK.3712 VA. while Phase B provides 2004 VA. and Phase C . Notice that the loads on Phase A. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B.

Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. under Electrical . A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. enter 30A. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. Next you create a panel schedule. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.15 Select panel PP-2B. Click OK. for Rating. 24 Select the transformer TP-2B. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. enter 25A. under Electrical . 26 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt.Loads. 17 Close the warning dialog. click Training Files. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power.Loads. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . and click OK. for Rating. and click OK. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. click (Open). The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Select PP-2B. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog.

select Berlin Sans FB. 5 In the Project Browser. Under Header Text. 4 Close the report. select Bold and Italic. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. for Font Size. 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. enter 1/8. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. under Other. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Edit. 6 In the Project Browser. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. 7 Select the schedule. Under Header Text. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. expand Sheets (all). click Training Files. Under Body Text. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. for Appearance. enter 3/32. for Font. 11 Click OK twice. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected.rvt. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. click (Open). for Font Size. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and open E601 .Panel Schedules.

and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. select space Lounge 212. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. In the System Browser. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. Expand Unassigned. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. press TAB once. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. Checking Your Design | 215 . Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. In the System Browser. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. each with a load of 180VA. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit.

22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. 18 Select panel LP-2C. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. 20 On the Options Bar. zoom to space Electrical 214. 15 In the dialog. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 17 In the drawing area. under Warnings. for Panel. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 16 Close the details dialog. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. select MDP-1.14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.

217 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial.

218 .

click Duplicate.Vent. and click Properties. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 2 In the Project Browser.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. click Training Files. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. 219 . Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan.Sanitary. In this exercise. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. in addition to loading existing families. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Adding a pipe size. right-click PVC .Design is open. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you create a PVC pipe type. and click OK. 4 In the Name dialog. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. type PVC .rvt. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. In this lesson. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. and verify that Level 1 . you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. planning is critical to a successful design.Plumbing Plan .

21 In the right pane. click Pipe Settings. enter 27/32''. and click OK. select Sanitary.0''. select Sanitary.Sch 40 . 6 Click OK. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary.PVC .Sch 40 . 24 For Inside Diameter. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. enter 10°. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. Tap. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. In the Project Browser. For Offset.DWV. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . click Modify. 13 In the right panel. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 10 On the Selection panel. for Material.5 In the Type Properties dialog. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. under Pipe Types.Sch 40 . click Training Files. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. 22 Click New Size. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. enter 1/2''.PVC . enter 5/8''. for Nominal. select Plastic. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 26 Click OK. Tee. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. PVC .DWV: Standard. and click Main. select Tee Reducing Double Vent . 18 For System Type. 15 For System Type. 27 For the new pipe size. and open Imperial\Families\Trap P . 25 For Outside. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent.PVC . select Branch. enter -4' .DWV: Standard. select None. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected.Vent is listed. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. under Mechanical. 17 In the left pane. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . Cross.rfa. select Tee Vent . select Tee. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings.

Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. Create the sanitary plumbing system. vent. and hot and cold water piping. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. sanitary piping. including plumbing fixtures. 221 . You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. Create the cold water system. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. Create the hot water system. add a hot water heater. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system.

NOTE To identify a space name and number. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i.rvt. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan. click Training Files. and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. you add 2 toilets. and verify that Level 1 . 1 urinal. Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser.Plumbing Plan . including the men’s room (space Male 107).Design ➤ Floor Plans.Design is open. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. as shown. 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .

6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space. as shown. centered on the bottom horizontal reference line.Wall Mounted. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture.6 gpf. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components. and 3 sinks.Flush Valve . against the left wall.1. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 . in the Type Selector. under Water Closet .The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. select Public . 4 On the Element panel. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 5 On the Placement panel. 1 wall-mounted urinal.

under Urinal . Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line. 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . above the first in the standard toilet space. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces. (Again.Wall Hung.) 8 Press Esc. select 3/4'' Flush Valve.7 Click to place another toilet. zoom in closer. use the reference line to center the fixture. and press Esc.

14 Click Modify. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 .Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector. 12 On the Placement panel. select 5''x5'' Strainer .2'' Drain. you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. under Floor Drain .Rectangular. click Place on Face. In placing the fixture. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).

In this exercise. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. and a floor drain. and Default Domestic Cold Water.rvt. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . right-click in the System Browser table heading. 17 If all disciplines are displayed. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. click Training Files. 19 Expand Default Sanitary. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and click View ➤ Piping. a urinal.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). and review the components listed under this system.

4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 2 In the Project Browser. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. clear Lines (<Overhead>). starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Only plumbing fixtures are selected. draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Creating a Sanitary System | 227 .Design is open. verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected. 8 In the Filter dialog. 6 In the plan view. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and click OK. and verify that Level 1 .Plumbing Plan . open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser.

228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . If you deselected the drain. expand Sanitary. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. enter Sanitary 107. 11 On the Options Bar. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. for System Name. 13 In the Systems Browser. 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. so the Create Sanitary System is available. 12 On the Edit System panel.9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. click Finish Editing System. You include the bathroom space number in the name.

select Sanitary 107. A preview of the piping layout displays. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . for example. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. a toilet. 16 In the Select a System dialog. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. at the midpoint of the detail lines. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. and click OK. The base is placed. select one of the components in the system.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. as shown. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow.

for Solution Type. for Offset. and modify it to meet project requirements. select Main. and click Settings. 25 On the Options Bar. click Solutions. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. 27 Click Modify. 26 On the Options Bar. The default settings are automatically modified. select Intersections. You accept this suggested solution. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical.19 On the Options Bar. 24 In the left pane. 23 For Offset. enter 1/8'' / 12''. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. 21 On Options Bar. enter -1' 0''. enter -1' 0''. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. for Diameter. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. for Slope. enter -4'-0”. select 4''. select Branch. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. and click OK. and for Offset.

and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . select the vertical route path segments. 29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow).Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl.

as shown.30 In the 3D view. use the ViewCube to orient the view. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . as shown. 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 31 Click Modify.

click Finish Layout. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 .33 Using the previous method. 34 On the Generate Layout panel.

select the fitting and click to reorient it. When a fitting is reversed. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . as shown.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. and check the slope control. adding sinks in the men’s room. 38 Close the file with or without saving it. you continue with the work from the last exercise.

Public. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .rvt. and verify that Level 1 . 5 On the Placement panel.Design is open. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107).Plumbing Plan . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. in the Type Selector.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. under Lavatory . as shown.Rectangular. 4 On the Element panel. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line. click Training Files. select 22''x22'' .

you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. and press Enter to create a second sink. select Multiple. in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. 8 Select the sink. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. enter 2' 4''. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . For example. without having to enter ' and '' symbols.7 Click Modify. On the Options Bar. TIP When entering dimensions.

Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. 12 In the drawing area. 11 In the System Browser. click Finish Editing System. Press Esc. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 16 On the Edit System panel. 15 Click the 3 sinks. and press Enter to create the third sink. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. click Add To System. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.

and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. and click Draw Pipe. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. 22 In the plan view. with the tee fitting selected. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). 19 In the 3D view. as shown. under Design ➤ Plumbing . 20 Select the fitting. double-click 3D Plumbing. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 21 Select the tee.Design ➤ 3D Views. use the ViewCube to orient the view.In the System Browser. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal.

and click Apply. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. for Slope. 24 On the Options Bar. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for Offset. enter 2' . the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting.6''. When you press the Spacebar. press Spacebar. NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. In this example.23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. and click to draw the pipe. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green. 27 Click Modify. 26 On the Options Bar. enter 1/8'' / 12''.

3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. select Standard. click to place the fitting.Sch 40 . and when the vertical center line displays.DWV. move the cursor over the stub pipe. 29 In the Type Selector. 32 Select the double wye fitting.PVC . 31 Click Modify. 30 In the 3D view. under Wye 45 Deg Double . and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 .

In the next steps. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. 34 Press Esc. for Offset. and press Enter. zoom in to the double wye fitting. enter 6''. double-click the section head to open the section view. 36 In the section view.33 With the fitting selected. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the right connector. enter 1'. 37 Select the fitting. on the Options Bar. and press Enter. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. you add pipe segments to the double wye.

and click to place the pipe. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. as shown.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. 41 Using the same method. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . 40 Click Modify. 42 Click Modify. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered.

draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. 48 Click Modify. right-click the bottom connector. press Spacebar. 47 Move the cursor down. 49 Using the same method. 46 In the section view. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. and click Draw Pipe. and press Esc. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. enter 6''. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

select Standard. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. 56 Using the same method. select the P-Trap on the left. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. 52 In the plan view. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. under Trap P . 53 Using the same method.PVC .50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 51 In the Type Selector. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks.DWV. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps.Sch 40 . 54 Click Modify. 55 In the 3D view.

click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink.. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. Click Modify. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. In the plan view. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. Select the double wye pipe on the left.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Click in the plan view. connect the right sink to the double wye. and click Draw Pipe. enter 6''. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Move the cursor to the left. select the left P-Trap. 58 Using the same method. and press Enter.

Press Esc. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. select PVC Sanitary. as shown. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. while pressing Ctrl. and select a proposed solution. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. under Pipe Types. click Finish to select the recommended solution. On the Routing Solutions panel. select the section of pipe you just drew.■ In the 3D view. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . In the Type Selector. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. while pressing Ctrl.

You have appropriately sloped the pipe. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . click Training Files. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. for Slope. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. adjusting the sanitary stack. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and verify the slope. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Finish.rvt. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. 62 On the Options Bar.

10 In the 3D view. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing.Plumbing Plan . 9 In the Type Selector. select the vertical stack.Design. 5 Select the tee. click Modify. as shown.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser.DWV. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 .Floor level line. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.PVC . and click to draw the pipe. 3 In the Section view. select Standard. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. and click the intersection to place the fitting. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. under Wye Combination with 8th Bend . and click Draw Pipe. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . select the elbow fitting on the right.Design. 7 On the Selection panel. right-click the top connector. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 .Overall.Sch 40 . and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .

250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click the rotate control to change the orientation. select Standard. under Plug . 14 On the Options Bar. click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe.Sch 40 . 13 Click the rotate control once.DWV. Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. enter 1'-0”. 12 Select the fitting.PVC . for Offset.11 Click Modify. as shown. 15 Press Esc. 17 In the Type Selector. 18 In the plan view.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.rvt. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks. and verify that Level 1 . Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser. Creating the Cold Water System | 251 .Plumbing Plan .19 Click Modify. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Training Files. Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise.Design is open. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout.

and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system.Design ➤ 3D Views. you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector. if necessary. minimize the Sanitary system. for System Type. select Pipe Types: Water. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. expand Unassigned. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 14 In the System Browser.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. For Offset. select Domestic Hot Water. for System Type. and click OK. select Main. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed.Overall. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. select Branch. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Filter dialog. double-click 3D Plumbing . select Plumbing Fixtures. 7 In the left pane. select Pipe Types: Water. and sinks. 9 In the left pane. select Domestic Hot Water. verify that the value is 9' 0''. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 15 In the plan view. select Domestic Cold Water.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and click Main. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. enter 9' 3''. For Offset. 6 In the left pane.) 10 Click OK. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. click Check None. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. 4 In the right pane. select Branch. draw a selection box to select the toilets. under Design ➤ Plumbing . and for System Type. To minimize opportunities for piping interference. urinal.

notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. In the System Browser. 21 On the Edit System panel. enter DCW 107. indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. For Flow Conversion Method. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. click Finish Editing System. Notice that the water main displays in blue. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 . verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected. 19 On the System Tools panel. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. click Edit System.18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.

29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. enter 0”/12”. as shown. 37 On the Options Bar. and click the connector. 30 In the plan view. select the sink above the urinal. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. and click Draw Pipe. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. for Offset. enter 7''. 35 In the Type Selector. 33 Click Modify. right-click the top DCW connector. click to the left of the urinal. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. enter 4'0”. enter 10'. 31 On the Options Bar. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. select 3/4''. at the intersection of the water main pipe. and click to place the pipe.25 Using the same method. for Offset. and press Enter. select Water. 28 In the Type Selector. For Offset. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . under Pipe Types. enter 3' .2 7/8''. For Slope. connect the second toilet. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. and press Enter. 36 Move the cursor to the left. as shown. 32 Move the cursor to the right. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. 34 In the plan view.

41 Select the top sink. The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and click OK. 42 In the Select Connector dialog. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe.39 Move the cursor to the left. select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. and click to connect to the main cold water line. Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . 40 Click Modify. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]).

connect the middle sink to the branch pipe. you create the hot water system. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .44 Using the same method. add a water heater. Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise. and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system. 45 Close the file with or without saving it.

2 In the Project Browser. select the 3 sinks. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 5 In the System Browser. Creating the Hot Water System | 257 . 6 In the plan view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design ➤ Floor Plans. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser.Plumbing Plan . open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . while pressing Ctrl.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Training Files. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen.rvt. and verify that Level 1 .Overall.Design is open. and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing . expand the Unassigned folder.

and click Edit System. as shown.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. 13 In the plan view. enter Domestic Hot Water 107. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog.Tankless. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select 0. Default Domestic Cold Water. 10 In the System Browser. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. you edit the system to add equipment. for System Name. under Water Heater . 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. verify that DCW 107 is selected. When designing systems. Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. 15 In the System Browser. in the Unassigned folder. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater. 14 Click Modify. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. Default Domestic Hot Water. 12 In the Type Selector. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.6 Gallon. In later steps. and click OK.

click Finish Editing System. and click the water main line. right-click the middle left connector.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 24 Move the cursor up. 21 On the Placement Tools panel. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. 23 On the Options Bar. 25 On the Options Bar. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. Offset: 4' 6''. enter 10’. as shown. 19 Select the water heater. and select Draw Pipe. Slope: 0''/12''. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. and press Enter. and on the Edit System panel. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . verify that Automatically Connect is selected. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. enter 1' 6''. 22 In the Type Selector. for Offset. select the water heater. 26 Move the cursor to the right. 27 Click Modify.

260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 36 Move the cursor down. and on the Placement Tools panel. select a sink. for Diameter. 30 On the System Tools panel. 38 Move the cursor to the right. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. as shown. 33 On the Edit System panel. and in the System Selector. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. enter 1''.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. click Automatically Connect to switch it off. enter 1' 6''. enter 9' 0''. and click Draw Pipe. and press Enter. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. select Domestic Hot Water 107. click Finish Editing System. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. and for Offset. for Offset. 35 On the Options Bar. 37 On the Options Bar. select 4'-6''. click Edit System. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water).

and click just above the bottom sink. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 . 41 Move the cursor down. enter 2' 8''. and press Enter. enter 1’. 42 Click Modify. for Offset. as shown. 40 On the Options Bar.39 Move the cursor down.

44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool.43 In the 3D view. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system.46 Close the file with or without saving it. 47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i.

264 .

265 .Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.

266 .

rvt. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. If the tutorial training files are not present. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. go to http://www. 2 Right-click Standard. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. you can choose to save your work. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. 267 . click Training Files. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file.autodesk. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You create a new pipe type. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. In this tutorial. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. and click Duplicate. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. After finishing each exercise. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. However. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. In this lesson. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model.

For Offset. Next. and click Properties. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. under Mechanical. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. and enter Fire Protection Wet. 9 Click OK. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. For System Type. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. duct. However. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. select Main. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . In this exercise. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. or architectural components. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. For Offset. for Material. verify that 9' 0" is selected. select Fire Protection Wet. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. In the next exercise. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. For System Type. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. structural beams. you modify the type properties of the pipe. For Pipe Type.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). select Fire Protection Wet. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. For Pipe Type. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. verify that 9' 0" is specified. select Carbon Steel. 6 In the Project Browser. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. you create project parameters and work with schedules. In the left pane. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. click Rename. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. and then click OK. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path.

and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i.Fire Protection Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . under Fire Protection. and then click OK.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Design is highlighted. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. for Name. select Spaces. For Group parameter under. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. 6 In the drawing area. select the upper half of the building. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. click Add. for Sprinkler Zone. right-click. 5 Click OK twice. click Training Files. the space crossing lines display. enter Zone 1. enter Sprinkler Zone. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . select space Instruction 221 as shown. indicating that it’s the active view. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 8 Using a crossing window. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. and click Element Properties. select Fire Protection.rvt. Under Categories.

click Training Files. for Sprinkler Zone.rvt. 13 Using the same method. to which you add various parameters. enter Zone 2. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. including a calculated value parameter. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System .9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. under Fire Protection. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. and click OK. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify that only Spaces are selected. and then click OK. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. under Fire Protection. select Zone 1. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then click OK. for Sprinkler Zone. 10 In the Filter dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. you create schedules for sprinkler design. and then access instance properties. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

enter 15. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 10 In the Format dialog. click Add Parameter. select Maximum Spacing. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. For Name.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Select Schedule keys. and click Field Format. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. For Rounding. The schedule displays. 14 Select the new header. Click OK. select To the nearest 1'. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. Obstructed-Combustible. select Feet and fractional inches. For Key name. double-click on each column separator. Click OK. For Units. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 9 On the Formatting tab. For Group parameter under. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . enter Light. select Length. 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities.Design is highlighted. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. enter Maximum Spacing. enter Protection Area Construction Type. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. and on the ribbon. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule.Fire Protection Plan . 11 Click OK twice. For Type of Parameter. 6 Using the same method.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. select Fire Protection. indicating that it’s the active view. In the Maximum Spacing column. select Spaces. for Name. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 7 Click OK. click the Formatting tab.

double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . enter Sprinkler Schedule. 16 Using the same method. Unobstructed Extra. For Name. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. under Available fields. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. select Spaces. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. and press Enter. enter 130. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. Unobstructed Ordinary. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. Click OK.

21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. select Sprinkler Zone. click Edit. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. for Sorting/Grouping. For Discipline. For Then by. select Number. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. 19 Click the Formatting tab. The Sprinkler Schedule displays.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. select Level. For Rounding. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. Click OK. enter Minimum Sprinklers. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . 22 Click OK twice. and click Field Format. and click OK. select Common. select Minimum Sprinklers. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. Enter the formula operator / after Area. In the Fields dialog. For Type. select Area. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. select Fixed. For Units. For Formula. select 0 decimal place. 20 On the Formatting tab. Select Header and Blank line. and click View Properties. for Sort by. click . under Other. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab.

select Number. select Sprinkler Zone. select Grand totals. For Fields. and then click Field Format. verify that Use default settings is selected. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Hidden field. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. click Edit. Under Field formatting. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. select Level equals Level 2. 30 Click OK twice. for Filter by. and click View Properties. For Then by (second instance). for Filter. select Level. and select Totals only.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. select Minimum Sprinklers. 27 In the drawing area. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . ■ In the Format dialog. right-click the schedule. 26 Click OK 3 times. and then select Hidden field. For Fields. At the bottom of the dialog. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog.

select Count. for Fields. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. click Edit. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. delete the word Maximum. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . select Embedded Schedule. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. On the Formatting tab. for Available fields. select Grand totals. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Other. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. and click View Properties. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. for Embedded Schedule. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. double-click Type. Under Field formatting. System Name. For Category. select Sprinklers.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. and select Totals only. select Calculate totals. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. and Count.

42 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Identity Data. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 43 Click Cancel. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). and click OK. 44 In the schedule. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. select Ordinary. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. select Ordinary. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. 52 Click OK. select space 221 Instruction. Unobstructed. select space 221 Instruction.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. under Identity Data. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. 46 With the space still selected. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool.Fire Protection Plan Design.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and access the instance properties. double-click FP . 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. Unobstructed. under Identity Data. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. Unobstructed. for Protection Area Construction Type. As a result. 48 In the floor plan. select Light. 50 Access the instance properties. and the spacing parameter values are evident. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 41 In the plan view. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Protection Area Construction Type. but their values are not determined.

53 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .

278 .

you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. 279 . After finishing each exercise. you can choose to save your work. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded.rvt. go to http://www. By following the recommended workflow.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. At the end of this tutorial. and double-click Level 2 . methodology. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial.com/revitmep-documentation and download them.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. If the tutorial training files are not present. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. As you place the sprinklers. In the left pane of the Open dialog.autodesk. As you create the system. click Training Files. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. However. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you will understand the process.

IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. After placing the initial sprinkler.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. When this happens. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 3 In the Project Browser. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. When there is a small misalignment.

because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. and select Sprinkler . place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles.Pendent . Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204. as shown. 9 In space Instruction 202. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face.Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. 11 In the drawing area. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. 10 Press Esc twice. and click to place 3 sprinklers. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. select the sprinklers that you placed. while pressing Ctrl.

12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. Also. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. and then press Esc. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. Next. you place non-hosted sprinklers. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. verify that Constrain is cleared. as shown. 13 On the Options Bar. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

25 Click OK. you place non-hosted sprinklers. Because the sprinkler is not hosted.FP_Ceiling view. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . enter 10' 6". move the cursor to the right. Adding Sprinklers | 283 . 22 In the 200A Corridor space. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. This number is determined in the schedule.Fire Protection Plan . 18 Type WT. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. open Design ➤ FP . 17 In the Project Browser. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally.Design. under Constraints. enter 11. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. you adjust the offset. Notice that the schedule updates. Next. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. For Number. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. specify a vertical offset. enter 14' 6". for Offset. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. and press Enter. 29 Press Esc. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0".Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. and click Element Properties. 19 In the floor plan.Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. and 200C). Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. 200B.

30 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. and with piping (physical connection). verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . indicating that it’s the active view. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). In this exercise.Design is highlighted. click Training Files. and then creating the logical connection between these system components.rvt. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. However. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. Unlike logical connections (systems). physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers.Fire Protection Plan . After creating the logical connection. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

Creating a Piping System | 285 . IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. as shown. In the System Browser.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. named Fire Protection Wet. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. click View ➤ Systems. and select Piping. 5 Right-click the header. within the Piping Systems folder. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. As you assign sprinklers to systems. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.

10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. 13 In the System Browser. 15 In the drawing area. and number of elements in the system. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 11 With the system still selected. verify that Main is selected.Wet is selected. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. and click Select. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. In the left pane. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. system equipment. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. Next. place the cursor over a sprinkler. press Tab. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . select an initial piping layout. click Settings. and a piping layout preview displays. 19 Click OK. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. For Offset. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. enter FP Wet_Zone2. verify that 9' 0" is specified. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. indicating the logical connection. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. for System Name. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. The Generate Layout tools are activated. and select the system. providing system editing tools. and on the Options Bar. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. select Branch. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. The Edit Piping System panel displays.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. 14 Click Finish Editing System. For Pipe Type. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 12 On the Options Bar.

the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. as shown. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. click Place Base.20 On the Generate Layout panel. 22 On the Options Bar. enter -12' 0". 23 For Offset. 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. When the layout is finished. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. In general. (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . verify that Network is selected. select 2". and green represents branch lines). The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. and select solution 5. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. click Solutions. for Diameter.

First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. as shown. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. A (parallel movement control) displays. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . On the Generate Layout panel. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. click Modify. 29 Click Finish Layout. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created.

click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. select a different layout solution.IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . Next. and then you create piping to physically connect them. or that offset elevations are incorrect. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. the Connect Into tool. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. or manually modify the pipe. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. and various manual pipe creation tools. Either relocate the system components. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. 32 If necessary.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection.

1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .rvt. 2 Zoom in. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and select the elbow fitting as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 If necessary.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i. 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee.Fire Protection Plan .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files.Design is highlighted. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.

12 On the Options Bar. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. for Solution Type. radiators. and so on) are logically connected by a system. 9 On the Edit System panel. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. click Finish Editing System. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. verify that Network is selected. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. mechanical equipment. 18 Click Finish Editing System. 8 In the corridor. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. air terminals. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. 14 Close the System Browser. and pipe or duct is created. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). 11 On the Generate Layout panel. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. verify that Solutions is selected. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. 13 Click Finish Layout. click Add To System. and select solution 5. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). 5 In the drawing area. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . or a system component to display system tools. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. you can select the pipe or duct.

and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. 25 Select the sprinkler. 28 In the drawing area. and then tile the views. 23 View the result in the 3D view. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. right-click. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. and then press Esc. 24 In the Piping Plan. for Offset. 21 In the Piping Plan. 27 On the Options Bar.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint.20 Open Design ➤ FP . and click Draw Pipe. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select 9'.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. 29 Using the same method.

zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. 31 In the plan view.Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. Because the whole system highlights. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 . 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system.

■ 6 Press Esc. for Scale. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Fire Protection Plan . click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area.Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . double-click on the section head to open the section view. click Training Files. 4 On the Options Bar. select 1/4" = 1'-0". 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area.Design is highlighted. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

21 On the Options Bar. for Diameter. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. select 4".

for Diameter. 24 In the drawing area. select 1 1/4". 26 Using the same method. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . 23 Close the 3D view. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs). 25 On the Options Bar. as shown. change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers. and then tag the piping as shown. The pipe diameter is modified.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. and maximize the floor plan. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch.

You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. you created a wet fire protection system. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. In this exercise. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. For additional practice. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. You added tags to pipes. In this tutorial. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. create details.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. add annotations and dimensions. 305 .

306 .

and click Rename. 3 In the Rename View dialog. If the view included detail graphics. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. right-click Copy of Level 1. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . click Training Files. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Floor Plans. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. and click Properties. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and apply a view template. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. you begin the construction documentation for the building project.rvt. and click OK. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 307 . and view references.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. dependent views. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i. matchlines. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. right-click Level 1. 2 In the Project Browser. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view.

select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. to delineate splits in a large floor plan.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. views and put them on the sheet. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 Using the same method. create dependent views for areas B and C. 6 In the Project Browser. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Apply Default View Template. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. and then press Esc. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. 9 Click OK. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. and click Rename. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. 10 In the drawing area. more focused. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. and click OK. as shown. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels.rvt. click Training Files. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK.

click the current value. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. select black. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. 19 In the drawing area. for Target view. and then press Esc. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. select 11. Click OK. select Double Dash 5/8". For Line Pattern./ ---).12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. For Line Weight. 20 Select the upper view reference and. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. on the Options Bar. and click OK. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . 21 Using the same method. 13 Press Esc twice. 14 Click Finish Matchline. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as . In the Color dialog.

crop the dependent views for plans B and C. 25 Using the same method. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. as shown. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 27 Using the same method.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. and zoom to each of the view references. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203.

Click OK. 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping. and click Properties. enter Plumbing Isometric . right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. click Training Files. for View Classification. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. and select the section box. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. select Documentation. and click Apply Default View Template. select Plumbing Isometric. right-click 3D Plumbing. Under Graphics. For Sub-Discipline. The section crop lines no longer display. 6 In the Project Browser. For Default View Template. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . 4 In the Project Browser. right-click Plumbing Isometric .rvt.29 Close the file with or without saving it. for View Name.Domestic Water. 2 Zoom in. and click to select it. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. select Plumbing. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser.Domestic Water.

change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. press Tab 3 times. select Dash. and then click OK. Click Apply. 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. 12 Using the same method. For Pattern. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click to select it.9 Right-click. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. select 3.

13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. and click to select it. as shown). press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. 14 Right-click. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 .

On the View Control Bar. ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric . and click to select it. In the drawing area.Domestic Water view with detailing. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. press Tab 3 times. Right-click. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 17 Label the fixtures as shown.Sanitary Waste. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar. 18 Using methods learned previously. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping.15 Press Esc. click Reveal Hidden Elements. click Close Reveal Hidden Elements. On the View Control Bar. Click in the drawing area to start a text label.

select To the nearest 1/8". 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. When the view is associated with a sheet. and then place the callout view on a sheet. 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. click on the Format value. 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. as shown.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 25 Press Esc twice. 21 Click OK twice. Creating Callout Views | 315 . the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. and click to place the spot slope annotation. for Rounding. For Slope. you use a plan view to create a callout view. In the Format dialog. verify that Common is selected.

beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. 5 On the Options Bar. for Scale.rvt. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan). 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. select 1/4"=1'-0''.

11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category. double-click M601 . select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. using the same method. Creating Callout Views | 317 . ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. Click OK. select 5. drag it to the sheet. for Line Weight. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. 13 In the Project Browser.8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. under Sheets (all). 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections.

The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. enter WSHP PART PLAN. and click Apply Default View Template. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. For Title on Sheet. Click OK. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 17 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. For Default View Template. and select the viewport.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. right-click the callout view. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. for View Name. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information.Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Creating Callout Views | 319 . 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section. 19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers.

right-click the detail view. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. 25 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. and click Rename. under Names. and click Apply View Template. and click OK. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 26 In the Rename View dialog. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. and click OK. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. enter Typical WSHP Detail.

symbols. you learn how to: ■ add text notes. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. and annotation to create a legend. 321 . duct tags.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. linetypes. ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. ■ work with model-based components.

rvt. as shown. click Training Files. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. 8 With the text still selected. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan.Creating Annotations In this exercise. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles.

Creating Annotations | 323 . and a segment of rectangular duct.9 Press Esc twice. Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. 15 On the Options Bar. and then click Right Straight. 16 In the drawing area. Add leaders 10 Select the text box. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select a supply diffuser. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. as shown. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. verify that Leader is cleared. a return diffuser. a segment of round duct.

rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. 17 Click Modify. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. and click OK. under Category. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. for Ducts. 24 On the Options Bar. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .rfa. click Load.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. 21 In the Load Family dialog. clear Leader. and click Open. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. 20 In the Tags dialog. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. 22 In the Tags dialog. If necessary.

31 On the Options Bar. 32 In the drawing area. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser.25 In the drawing area. and then press Esc. select Horizontal. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. Leader. and Attached End. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. 26 On the Options Bar. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. as shown. Creating Annotations | 325 .

for Leader. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. as shown. select Free End.33 On the Options Bar. 34 In the drawing area.

Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. and all elements of that type are affected. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well.36 Press Esc twice. lay out. and click OK. 37 In the drawing area. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. for Leader Arrowhead. That’s because you changed a type property. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. select Dot Open 1/16". not simply an instance property. and lock lighting fixtures. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. you use temporary dimensions to locate. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Dimensions | 327 . Creating Dimensions In this exercise. 40 Using the method learned previously. select the last tag placed.

10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. 12 Press Esc. click Training Files. On the Options Bar. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. select the dimension line. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted.rvt. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. and then select the interior face of the wall. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. indicating that it’s the active view. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and press Enter. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. and offset them 8' from the wall. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. Creating a Legend | 329 . 20 Close the file with or without saving it. annotation symbols. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. 16 Press Esc.3 1/2"). Because the dimensions are locked. 19 Using the same methods.13 Using the same method. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. 18 Select the dimension value (7' . enter 8'. Creating a Legend In this exercise. Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line. linework. 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. and notes. click the 3 interior locks on the line.

4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. 5 Click in the drawing area. 10 Using the same method. ■ 9 In the drawing area. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component.rvt. For Scale. Click OK. and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. select Floor Plan. click below the title to place the diffuser. select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . For View.Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . select 1/4" = 1' -0". 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. enter Diffuser Legend.8 Neck. click Training Files.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser .Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 . Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend.

and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. 14 In the drawing area. Creating a Legend | 331 . 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. click next to the top diffuser.11 Press Esc. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.

and then press Esc.DROP and its text note. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .RISE symbol for the copy start point. The selected detail lines are now thin. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 24 Select the component’s break line.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 27 While pressing Ctrl. 26 Press Esc.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. 21 Press Esc. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 22 Zoom in to the copied component.

mirror the text on the center reference line of the component.30 Select Spot Elevation .MECHANICAL LEGEND. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. enter E. Creating a Legend | 333 . and then click Modify. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. and then click Modify.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . 35 Change the text on the right to N. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. 34 Using the method learned previously. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.

40 Press Esc. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .39 With the viewport still selected. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 41 Close the file with or without saving it.

335 . detail groups. A drafting view using detail components. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i. and text. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Detailing 15 In this lesson. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. A detail callout that references another view. click Training Files.113 East elevation view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser .

place Power Riser . and click to place it. 5 In the drawing area. 8 Using the same method. and then modify and align the views. select each of the 2 panelboards. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 .113 East on the sheet.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. Next. clear Leader. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 7 Drag the Power Riser .3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view.

and click Activate View. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. and click OK. under Identity Data. 12 Select the Level 1 line. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. giving the appearance of a single view. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . and click Deactivate View. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view.9 Press Esc. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. right-click. for Title on Sheet. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. select the 113 North view. 13 Right-click.

23 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Activate View. right-click. 22 Press Esc.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. select the 113 East elevation view. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. In the next exercise. right-click. 21 Using the drag control. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 19 Select the Level 1 line. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . you add wiring to the diagram. as shown.

select 6. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. As you draw. and click OK. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). 2 Close the Project Browser. notice that there are no snaps active. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 . verify that Chain is selected. for Line Weight. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. click Training Files. enter Electrical Power.113 North view. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. In the Line Styles dialog. for Name. expand Lines. click New. In the New Subcategory dialog. and then click OK.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 9 Beginning at the transformer. Under Modify Subcategories. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles.rvt. as shown. 8 On the Options Bar. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i.

as shown. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 13 On the Options Bar. enter 1/8". add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . for Offset. 11 Using the same method.10 Press Esc.

16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. TIP When you use the Trim tool. so that the result is as shown. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . you select the portion of the line that you want to keep.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim.

21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing .20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown.

and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). 28 Click above the cap. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 29 Click Modify. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. as shown.22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc.

33 On the Options Bar. 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select Multiple. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point.31 While pressing Ctrl.

for Offset. 39 Move the cursor to the right. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. 40 Press Esc. You enter exact values for each line length. 42 On the Options Bar. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. enter 3/32". 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard.5. and press Enter. and then press Esc. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset.36 Press Esc. enter 0 0. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol.

and click OK. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line.125. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. 46 In the Project Browser. expand Groups ➤ Detail. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. enter Ground. 47 In the drawing area. while pressing Ctrl. enter 0 0. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and press Enter. for Name. Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. Using the same method. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. Press Esc.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. select all 3 lines. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. 50 With the group selected. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. you can ensure that they stay together. click on the length dimension value. and then press Esc.25.

Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. TP-2B. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move.51 Using the method learned previously. 54 Select the group. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. 52 Select the detail group. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard.

enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. and will place it on sheet E01. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Rename.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. 5 Zoom in to view the section. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). and click OK. 4 Right-click the ViewCube. In later exercises. 2 Right-click the copy. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . for Name. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. click Training Files. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here.

6 Select the section box. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. and then press Esc. and Left sides converge. Back. 7 On the ViewCube. and then click the corner where the Top. click Home. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 .

and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. and click Apply View Template. Under Names. right-click. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. select 3D Views. Click OK. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. select 3D HVAC Iso. Walkthroughs.

click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper).14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. Move the cursor down and to the left. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . 19 Complete the text labels. 15 Using the same method. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. (Right). Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. and click to specify the second leader point. Typical. as shown.

and then click OK. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. select Crop Region Visible. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. as shown. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 25 Click OK. and under Extents. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS.To rotate and reposition a text label. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 23 Click on the crop region. under Extents. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. 24 Access the instance properties for the view.

and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 3 In the Project Browser. right-click the view name. and click Properties. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. For Scale. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. Use detail lines to create a detail group. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. Place a detail component. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. select the isometric view. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Click OK.29 In the drawing area. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select 3" = 1'-0". click Training Files. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes.rvt.

select Plumbing. For View Classification. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 13 In the drawing area. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. 12 On the Element panel. click the point at the top of the drain. 9 Zoom in to the component. 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". select Documentation. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. as the rectangle start point. for Sub-Discipline. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. Click OK. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. as shown. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel.4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

22 Click Modify. 20 Select 1. select the filled region. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. Drafting Detail Components | 355 .5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. 21 In the drawing area. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. 23 In the drawing area. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. Concrete. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Type. 18 With the filled region still selected.I.15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. (Line). and click OK. and then press Esc. select C.P. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary.

30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 34 Press Esc. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point.28 Click Modify. 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. select Multiple. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 31 On the Options Bar. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. and then click to select them.

Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. and then select the side of the slab above the line. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2.38 Pan to the other end of the slab. (Rectangle). 45 Using the method learned previously. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. 40 Click Finish Region. and then press Esc. as shown. 41 Type ZF to zoom out.

for Name. enter Flashing Membrane_F. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. draw wide detail lines as shown. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. as shown.D. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. 49 Click Modify.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select the Flashing Membrane group. press Tab to highlight the chain.. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. and then click to select them. 52 In the Create Group dialog. and click OK.

add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . 61 Using the same method. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. as shown.55 Press Esc.

and use the grips to resize the masking region.62 Press Esc twice. and then click OK. select the keynote and drag the text to the right.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. 67 On the Options Bar. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 72 If necessary. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. select Leader and Free End. 70 In the Keynotes dialog. 64 Press Esc twice. as shown. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. 71 Click Modify. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16.

80 Press Esc twice. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 76 To select the leader start point. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. 78 Move the cursor to the left. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. and click to specify the second leader point. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. and click to specify the text insertion point. 81 Select the text note. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right).Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view.

362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. 84 Using the following image as a guide. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.82 Continue annotating the detail. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. as shown.

88 In the drawing area. and click to place it. and then press Esc twice.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. 90 Press Esc. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 91 Close the file with or without saving it.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. select the view title. open P103 . Drafting Detail Components | 363 .

For Import units. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation. select 3. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view. select Auto-Detect.dwg.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. For Layers. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Click OK. For A-----NPP. select Visible. Click Open. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. For Colors. select Black and White. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing. you import a CAD detail drawing. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view.rvt. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . for Line Weight. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category.

select the viewport title. and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet. 15 Close the file with or without saving it.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. open P103 . 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport. Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser. 12 In the drawing area. and then press Esc. Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 . 11 Press Esc.8 Type ZF. 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.

366 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful